Yamaha RX A1070 Owner's Manual Web YJ290A0 EN1 Om UCRABGLF En A0

User Manual: Yamaha RX-A1070 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 172 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
EN
• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Introduction 5
Accessories................................................................................... 5
About this book ............................................................................ 5
About remote control .................................................................... 6
Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6
FEATURES 7
What you can do with the unit........................................................ 7
AV CONTROLLER............................................................................................................................................. 9
AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) .......................................................................................................................... 9
Application for smartphone / tablets “MusicCast CONTROLLER”............................................................... 9
Part names and functions .............................................................10
Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 10
Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 12
Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 13
Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 15
PREPARATIONS 16
General setup procedure ..............................................................16
1 Connecting speakers ..................................................................17
Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 18
Advanced speaker configuration ................................................................................................................ 26
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................32
Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 32
Connecting a TV ........................................................................................................................................... 33
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ................................................................................. 34
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ......................................................................................... 36
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ................................................................................................ 37
3 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................38
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ......................................................38
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only) ..........................................................38
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....39
Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................39
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................39
5 Connecting other devices............................................................40
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................40
6 Connecting the power cable........................................................40
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................41
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................42
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ..................43
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................45
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................46
Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................47
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments .................................................................................................48
Error messages .............................................................................................................................................49
Warning messages........................................................................................................................................50
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................51
Selecting the connection method ...............................................................................................................51
Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................52
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) .............................................................57
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................59
MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................59
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................59
PLAYBACK 60
Basic playback procedure.............................................................60
Selecting an HDMI output jack.....................................................................................................................60
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) ......................................................................................61
En 3
Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 62
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments................................................................... 62
Selecting the sound mode.............................................................63
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ............................................................................. 64
Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 67
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 68
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer).................................................................................................................... 68
Listening to FM/AM radio
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ........................69
Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 69
Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................ 69
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 70
Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 71
Listening to DAB radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................72
Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 72
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 72
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 73
Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 74
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ...........................................................................74
Listening to FM radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................76
Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................ 76
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 76
Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 78
Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 79
Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................80
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 80
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth speakers/headphones ............................................................................ 81
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device.........................82
Connecting a USB storage device ............................................................................................................... 82
Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................. 82
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ...................85
Media sharing setup..................................................................................................................................... 85
Playback of PC music contents ................................................................................................................... 86
Listening to Internet radio ............................................................89
Playback of Internet radio............................................................................................................................89
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) .............................................................................91
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay..................................92
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ....................................................................................................92
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ..............94
Multi-zone configuration examples .............................................................................................................94
Preparing Zone2 ...........................................................................................................................................95
Controlling Zone2.........................................................................................................................................98
Registering favorite items (shortcut)........................................... 100
Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................100
Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................100
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) ................. 101
Top menu screen ........................................................................................................................................102
Control screen.............................................................................................................................................102
Settings screen............................................................................................................................................103
Viewing the current status.......................................................... 104
Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................104
Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................105
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)........................................................................... 106
Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................106
CONFIGURATIONS 111
Configuring input sources (Input menu)....................................... 111
Input menu items .......................................................................................................................................111
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) ............................. 113
Scene menu items ......................................................................................................................................113
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu) ................................................................. 116
DSP Program menu items ..........................................................................................................................117
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 119
Setup menu items.......................................................................................................................................120
Speaker (Manual Setup) .............................................................................................................................123
Sound ..........................................................................................................................................................127
Video............................................................................................................................................................129
En 4
HDMI ........................................................................................................................................................... 130
Network ...................................................................................................................................................... 131
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 133
Multi Zone................................................................................................................................................... 134
Function...................................................................................................................................................... 137
ECO ............................................................................................................................................................. 139
Language .................................................................................................................................................... 140
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ...............140
Types of information.................................................................................................................................. 141
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 142
ADVANCED SETUP menu items ................................................................................................................. 143
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) ..................................................................... 143
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR)................................................................ 143
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)........................................................................................... 144
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) ........................................................ 144
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) .......................................................................................... 144
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK)....................................................... 144
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 145
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 145
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) ........................................................................... 145
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 146
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 146
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 146
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 147
Updating the unit’s firmware immediately .............................................................................................. 147
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off ............................................................................................... 148
APPENDIX 149
Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 149
Troubleshooting ........................................................................150
First, check the following:.......................................................................................................................... 150
Power, system and remote control........................................................................................................... 150
Audio........................................................................................................................................................... 151
Video ........................................................................................................................................................... 153
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)..... 154
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only) ................................................................... 154
Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................155
USB and network ........................................................................................................................................156
Error indications on the front display .......................................... 158
Glossary.................................................................................... 159
Audio information (audio decoding format) .............................................................................................159
Audio Information (Others) ........................................................................................................................161
HDMI and video information ......................................................................................................................161
Network information ..................................................................................................................................162
Yamaha technologies .................................................................................................................................162
Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 163
Supported devices......................................................................................................................................163
File formats .................................................................................................................................................163
Video signal flow........................................................................ 164
Video conversion table ...............................................................................................................................164
Multi-zone output .......................................................................................................................................165
Information on HDMI.................................................................. 165
HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................165
Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................167
HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................167
Trademarks............................................................................... 168
Specifications............................................................................ 169
En 5
Introduction
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
#AM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
#FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
#DAB/FM antenna
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
#YPAO microphone
#Power cable
#Remote control
#Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
#CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
#Quick Start Guide
* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.
About this book
The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A.
model, unless otherwise specified.
In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
“iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
Icons used in this manual
Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
X
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
En 6
About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.
Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.
Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
En 7
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features.
Connecting various devices (p.32)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on
the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD
players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles,
camcorders, and other devices.
Playing back TV audio in surround
sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel:
ARC) (p.32)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI
cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the
TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
More advanced ENTERTAINMENT
sound programs (p.65)
By processing front left and front right sound fields
individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are
further improved in acoustic positioning and sound
transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal
and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more
dynamic sound effects.
Various wireless connection
methods (p.51)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
without router.
Surround playback with 5 speakers
placed in front (p.66)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place
them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the
front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5
speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).
Home Audio Network with
MusicCast (p.59)
The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or
control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated
application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Low power consumption (p.140)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s
power consumption.
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from external
device
PL
Presence L
Sound field
PR
Presence R
Sound field
SL
Surround L
Sound field
SR
Surround R
Sound field
Image of sound field processing
En 8
CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
What is a sound field?
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly
but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or
ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the
shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give
us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound
fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this
data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs
using CINEMA DSP.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as
movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of
actually being in that scene.)
CINEMA DSP HD
3
“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Capability for reproducing reflections
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3
Level
CINEMA DSP 3D
Time
En 9
Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.
AV CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a
Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
commands and playback source.
Functions
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Playback control (including music selection for some
sources)
X
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google
Play.
AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)
“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with
cable connections between AV receiver and source devices
as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you
through the various settings such as speaker connections,
TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the
speaker system.
Functions
• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)
• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance
with illustrations)
• Viewing owner’s manual
X
For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google
Play.
MusicCast CONTROLLER
MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast
compatible devices in other rooms and play them back
simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or
other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily
select music to play back as well as configure the unit and
MusicCast compatible devices.
Functions
• Selecting and playing back various content
– Play back music from your mobile device
– Select an Internet radio station
– Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
– Play back music files stored on a USB storage device
• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the
audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features
X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
En 10
Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.
Front panel
aMAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
bStandby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
•HDMI Control is enabled (p.130)
•Standby Through is enabled (p.131)
•Network Standby is enabled (p.132)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.133)
cFront display
Displays information (p.12).
dRemote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.6).
ePURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.68).
fINPUT knob
Selects an input source.
gFront panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.11).
hVOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Opening the front panel door
To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
eb c da
fh
g
En 11
■Inside of the front panel door
aON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
bMenu operations keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
cOPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.106).
dDISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.105).
eTONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of
output sounds (p.107).
fSTRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.67).
Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5
seconds (p.59).
gPROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.63).
hSCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.61).
iMULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2: Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.98).
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is
controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.98).
jINFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.104).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.53).
kMEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.70, p.73,
p.76).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.100).
lFM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.69).
FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
Switch between FM and DAB (p.72, p.69).
mPRESET keys
Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.73, p.77) (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio station (p.70)
(other models).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.100).
nTUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.69).
oUSB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.82).
pYPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.43).
qPHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
rVIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console
(p.37).
(U.S.A. model)
En 12
Front display (indicators)
aHDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal.
bECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.140).
cFirmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network
(p.147)
dLINK MASTER
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast
network.
eZONE2
Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.98).
fSTEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) or an FM/AM radio
station signal (other models).
gPARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.99).
hInformation display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.104).
iVolume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
jMUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.
kA-DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.107) is working.
lSignal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.51).
mBluetooth indicator
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.80).
nHi-Res
Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.109) is working.
oCINEMA DSP indicator
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.64) is working.
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated.
pENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68) is working.
qSLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
rCursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
sVIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.64), or the virtual surround
processing (p.66) is working.
tSpeaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
AFront speaker (L)
SFront speaker (R)
DCenter speaker
FSurround speaker (L)
GSurround speaker (R)
HSurround back speaker (L)
JSurround back speaker (R)
KSurround back speaker
BFront presence speaker (L)
NFront presence speaker (R)
LSubwoofer
uYPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.107).
OUT
21
IN
A-DRC
VOL.
VIRTUAL
YPAO VOL.
3
ZONE
ECO
2
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
FPL
CL R
FPR
ENHANCER
SLEEP
STEREO TUNED
PARTY
MUTE
HD
LINK MASTER
Hi
-
Res
fjki
ol r utrqp
a
h
ge
dbc
sm n
En 13
Rear panel
(U.S.A. model)
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
AC IN
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONT
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R
56
L R R RL L L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
YP
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
p
n
qo
a d ic e mg h kfb lj
En 14
aPHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.36).
bAUDIO 1-3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.36).
cAV 1-4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.34).
dHDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.32). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.33), or for connecting to
an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.96).
eCOMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.34).
fHDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.34).
gTRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.40).
hREMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.96).
iNETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.39).
jWireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.51) and a Bluetooth connection (p.80).
kRS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.
lVOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Brazil and General models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.40).
mAC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.40).
nANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.38).
oZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.95).
pSPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.17).
qPRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.23) or to an external power amplifier (p.31).
En 15
Remote control
aRemote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
bz (receiver power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
cInput selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
AV 1-7: AV 1-7 jacks
V-AUX: VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1-3: AUDIO 1-3 jacks
PHONO: PHONO jacks
TUNER: FM/AM/DAB radio
BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection
(the unit as a Bluetooth receiver)
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK sources
(press repeatedly to select a desired network source)
dMAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the
remote control (p.98).
eSCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and various
settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in
standby mode (p.61).
fPROGRAM keys
Select a sound program, a surround decoder, an input source, a
network source, a registered item (shortcut), a browse screen
page, the volume of dialogue sounds or shuffle/repeat settings
(p.137).
gExternal device operation keys
Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device
(p.165).
hON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
iMenu operation keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or the parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
jRadio keys
Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.69).
BAND: Switches between FM and DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models), or FM and AM radio (other models).
PRESET: Select a preset station.
TUNING: Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is
selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI
Control-compatible playback device (p.165).
kSound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.63).
lINFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.104).
mSLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.
nNumeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as presets (p.70, p.73, p.76).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.100).
oHDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.60).
pPARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.99).
qVOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
rMUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
sOPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.106).
tDISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.105).
X
(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
For information on the keys other than those above, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUMEPROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
p
r
o
s
t
a
c
b
e
d
f
q
g
n
m
h
j
k
l
i
(U.S.A. model)
En 16
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.17)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.32)
3 Connecting the radio antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.38)
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.39)
5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.40)
6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.40)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.41)
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.42)
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.43)
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.59)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En 17
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.26).
Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker
X
• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However,
the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.64).
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker
layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.23).
E
12
3
9
4
67
5
9
R
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
10°~30°10°~30°
Speaker type Function
Front (L/R)
1 2Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Center 3Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L/R)
4 5
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
Surround back (L/R)
6 7Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Front presence (L/R)
E R
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
En 18
Basic speaker configuration
If you do not apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external amplifier) or multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect
them to the unit.
■Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This
section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
X
• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).
• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
layout” (p.22).
7.1/5.1.2 system [S]
(using both surround back and front presence speakers)
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
X
• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP (p.64).
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.42).
En 19
5.1.2 system [S] (using front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not
only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.42).
7.1 system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy
extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
En 20
5.1 system
X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1 system).
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using surround speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
X
When placing surround speakers in the front side, set “Layout (Surround)” in the “Setup” menu to “Front” before
performing YPAO (p.42).
45
12
39
En 21
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using front presence speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.42).
2.1 system
X
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.
12
39
ER
En 22
Presence speaker layout
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead and
Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment.
X
You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.
Front Height
Install the presence speakers on the front side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.
Y
For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.22).
Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers
that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening position,
or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position.
Caution
Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
En 23
■Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm
speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
2While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
3Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
■Connecting speakers
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables
Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire
strands into the unit's interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit
or the speakers.
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before
connecting the speakers.
• Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit's metal parts
(rear panel and screws).
If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker cables short circuit.
MAIN ZONE zSTRAIGHT
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
SPEAKER¡IMP.
En 24
Speakers to be connected
If you have nine speakers, you can connect the both surround back speakers and front
presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be used,
depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front presence
speakers (*2).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence speakers
(*4).
X
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
• When apply this speaker configuration, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.123) to “Basic” (default).
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.31).
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
Y
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
Speaker type
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
7.1/5.1.2 5.1 2.1
Front (L/R) 1 2(((
Center 3((
Surround (L/R) 4 5()*3
Surround back (L/R) 6 7)*1
Front presence (L/R) E R)*2 )*4
Subwoofer 9(((
–
+
–
+
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONT
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R L R R RL L L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1
EXTRA SP2
1
67
2
3
45
99
ER
The unit (rear)
En 25
Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and
the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent
confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
1Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
2Loosen the speaker terminal.
3Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
4Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Brazil and General models only)
1Tighten the speaker terminal.
2Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
FRONT
+
11
2
2
4
4
33
+ (red)
– (black)
FRONT
+
11
22
Banana plug
(SINGLE)(FRONT)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
CENTER
SUR. BACKSURRUND
1
2
SURROUND BACK
L
Audio pin cable
En 26
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.18), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
(Example) (Example) (Example)
Bi-amp
connection
Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi
amplifier, etc.) to build an
extended system
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
External power
amplifier
Main zone
Zone2
Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration
En 27
■Available speaker configurations
Y
When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup”
menu (p.42).
7.1 +1Zone
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.98), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
Main zone
Multi-zone Power Amp Assign
(p.123) Page
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
Surround
back/ Front
presence
External power
amplifier
(required)
7 Surround back +1 (Zone2)7.1 +1Zone 27
7 Front presence +1 (Zone2)5.1.2 +1Zone 28
5)5.1 Bi-Amp 28
7)Surround back Surround back 7.1 Bi-Amp [ext.SB] 29
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
3CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER (not used)
9SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP1
21
12
3
4
6
99
7
5
Main zone
Zone2
En 28
5.1.2 +1Zone
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.98), the front presence speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
5.1 Bi-Amp
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
3CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 (not used)
ER EXTRA SP1
9SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP2
21
1
ER
2
3
4
99
5
Main zone
Zone2
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 (not used)
ER (not used)
9SUBWOOFER 1-2
1
3
45
99
2
Bi-amp
En 29
7.1 Bi-Amp [ext.SB] ■Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT
terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals.
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu
after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.42).
X
The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals output the same signals.
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
ER (not used)
9SUBWOOFER 1-2
1
3
45
99
2
67
Bi-amp
via external amp
Caution
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONT
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R L R R RL L L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
12
3
9
45
9
The unit (rear)
En 30
■Connecting Zone2 speakers
When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP1 or EXTRA SP2 terminals.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign”
setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.42).
X
You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.95).
(when using surround back speakers in the main zone)
(when using front presence speakers in the main zone)
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONT
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R L R R RL L L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
FL FR
12
3
45
76
99
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONT
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R L R R RL L L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
FL FR
12
3
45
99
ER
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
En 31
■Connecting an external power amplifier
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input
jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are
output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
aFRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
bSURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
cSUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the
external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
dCENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
(Example)
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
• With unbalanced inputs
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 Ω)
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume
of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the
unit) to the pre-main amplifier.
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
A
V 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONT
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R L R R RL L L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
a bcd
The unit (rear)
HDMI
V 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONT
SURROUND BACK
ROUND
F.PRESENCE
L R R RL L L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
PRPB
PRPB
NT VIDEO
MAIN IN
PR
SU
R
FRONT
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
Main input jack
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)
En 32
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices
Connect a TV and playback devices (video and audio devices) to the unit.
For information on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.82).
Input/output jacks and cables
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.
■Video/audio jacks
To input/output video and audio signals, use the following
jacks.
HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a
cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation.
X
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
■Video jacks
To input only video signals, use the following jacks.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three components:
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red
(Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■Audio jacks
To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.
OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.
Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.
COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.
AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
AV 1
HDMI cable
YP
R
P
B
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
Component video cable
AV 1
VIDEO
Video pin cable
Digital optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
AUDIO3
Stereo pin cable
En 33
Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
■HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin
cable).
Y
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.33).
X
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details
on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.165).
■Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with
an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the
remote control (p.60).
Y
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for
Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.96).
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUND
R
56
L
AM
FRONT
Y
P
R
PB
Y
P
R
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
ARC(ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
HDMI
HDMI
OO
R
L L
R
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
HDMI input
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUND
R
56
L
AM
FRONT
YP
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
HDMI
ARC(ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
HDMI
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI input
Projector
TV (already connected)
TV
En 34
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the
unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of
the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
an HDMI output jack.
Y
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
(p.137) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.
X
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.109) in the “Option” menu.
■HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-7 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
■Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio
output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-2 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.137) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.
I
OUT
ARC
1
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AV 3 AV 4
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R
6
L R RL L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
N
E
YP
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
C
P2.2)
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital coaxial AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKER
S
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENC
R
56
L R RL
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-A
M
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1
EXTRA SP2
TRIG
G
OU
T
1
2
12V
0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
R
L
COAXIAL
L
R
L
R
PR
PB
Y
Y
B
P
RP
CC
The unit (rear)
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital or analog stereo)
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or
AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks
En 35
■Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,
digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DV
D
AV 1
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
ZON
ZONE 2
R
56
AM
Y
Y
COM
A
V
B
A
V
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
L
R
L
R
OO
C C
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks
En 36
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio
output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections.
Y
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
(p.137) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks
to another input source.
X
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.109) in the “Option” menu.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-3 or PHONO on the remote control,
the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit
Digital coaxial AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1-4 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1-3 (AUDIO)
Turntable (PHONO)PHONO
When connecting a turntable
•The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUND
R
56
L
AM
FRONT
Y
P
R
PB
Y
P
R
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
R
L
PHONO
GND
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
PHONO
GND
C C
L
R
L
R
O O
L
R
L
R
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-3
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks
The unit
(rear)
Audio device
PHONO jacks Audio output
(PHONO)
Turntable
Ground lead
En 37
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Use the USB jack to connect a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting a USB storage
device” (p.82).
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the
unit.
■HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
Y
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.
■Analog stereo connection
Connect an audio playback device (such as CD players) to the unit with a stereo pin cable.
If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the audio played back on the
device will be output from the unit.
X
• If you connect devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs
audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks, the unit
outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
DISPLAY
RETURN
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
USB
SILENT CINEMA
HDMI IN
RL AUDIO
ENTER
5V 1A
HDMI
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
DISPLAY
RETURN
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
USB
SILENT CINEMA
HDMI IN
RL AUDIO
ENTER
5V 1A
RL
The unit (front)
Audio device
En 38
3 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit.
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling the AM antenna
Connecting the AM antenna
X
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R
56
L R RL L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
IN
R
E
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R
56
L R RL L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
R
L
75
(4 RADIO)
DAB/FM
DAB/FM antenna
The unit (rear)
En 39
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network
Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Connecting the network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or
higher straight cable).
X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.131).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.141) in the “Information” menu.
Y
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security
software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Preparing the wireless antenna
If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.51).
Y
Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
En 40
5 Connecting other devices
Connect a device compatible with the trigger function.
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such
as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a
system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by
connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug
cable.
X
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.138) in the “Setup”
menu.
6 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (Brazil and General models only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are
AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
Y
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard.
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then
to an AC wall outlet.
HDMI
3
AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONT
SURROUND BACK
F.PRESENCE
R R RL L L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
E
OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
R
OUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
System connector
jack
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
E
RS
CENTER FRONT
N
CE
RL L
-
AMP
S
P1
RS-232C
GGER
O
UT
.
1A
T
AL
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V-
240V
110V-
120V
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
OUT
O
TE
AC IN
CENTER
FRONT
R L
RS-232C
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
En 41
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default),
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
1Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
X
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3Press ON SCREEN.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the
cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language.
6To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
7To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
z
Cursor keys
En 42
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
manually before performing YPAO.
• Advanced speaker configuration (p.26)
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.20)
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.22)
1Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
X
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3Press ON SCREEN.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker” and
then “Manual Setup”.
6Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
• When using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, select “Power
Amp Assign” (p.123), then select your speaker system.
• When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Layout” !
“Surround” (p.124), then select “Front”.
• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
playback, select “Configuration” ! “Layout” ! “Front
Presence” (p.125), then select your front presence speaker
layout.
7To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
z
Cursor keys
En 43
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your
listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker
settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your
room.
X
The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed
for acoustic perfection.
Y
Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
– Do not connect headphones.
1Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
X
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
4Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and
connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
X
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the
tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
The following screen appears on the TV.
X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
YPAO MIC
9
12
3
45
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
YPAO MIC
jack
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
RETURN
z
En 44
5If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single).
1Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
2Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Settings
X
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for
you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the
listening position you will be seated most frequently.
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.46)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.45)
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening positions
or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take
measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room.
The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
a b
a
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
de
bac
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions +
front/back)
Multi measure
(1 listening position +
front/back/left/right)
Single measure
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 45
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the measurement.
1To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
start the measurement immediately.
X
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement
finishes.
Y
If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see
“Error messages” (p.49) or “Warning messages” (p.50).
X
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
the measurement results” (p.47).
2Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press
ENTER.
3To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys
(e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
4Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
X
•If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.107) in the
“Option” menu.
5Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 46
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening
positions.
Y
If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error
messages” (p.49) or “Warning messages” (p.50).
1To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
start the measurement immediately.
X
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at
the first position finishes.
2Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position
and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.
3When the measurements at the positions you want to
measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
“CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the
following screen appears automatically.
X
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
the measurement results” (p.47).
4Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press
ENTER.
5To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to
select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 47
6Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
X
•If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.107) in the
“Option” menu.
7Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Result” and press ENTER.
X
You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
aMeasurement result items
bMeasurement result details
cThe number of measured positions (when multi measure is
performed)
2Use the cursor keys to select an item.
3To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
ab
c
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 48
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and
reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”,
and then “Result” (p.119).
2Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
ENTER.
3To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 49
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”,
YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers
are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions
to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
En 50
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1: Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.47) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.47) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the
listening position.
W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers.
Select “Level” in “Result” (p.47) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using
the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.
En 51
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the
unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.52).
Y
You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with Wireless Direct (p.57).
■Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.9) to control the unit
from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless
Direct)” (p.57).
Y
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.39) or the wireless
network connection (p.52).
•When Wireless Direct is enabled, the both the unit and mobile device cannot be connected to the Internet. In
this case, you cannot use the Internet services such as Internet radio. To use the Internet services, terminate
the Wireless Direct connection on the mobile device.
The unit
Wireless router
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
The unit
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
En 52
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.59)
• Sharing the iOS device setting (p.52)
• Using the WPS push button configuration (p.53)
• Using other connection methods (p.54)
■Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection
settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
Y
If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be
initialized.
– Network settings
– Bluetooth settings
– USB and network items registered as shortcuts
– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”
– Account information for the network services
X
• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example
for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3Press ON SCREEN.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share
Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 53
9After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor
keys (e/r) and ENTER to select “NEXT”.
10On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in
the Wi-Fi screen.
11Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point).
■Using the WPS push button configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS
button.
Y
This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access
point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.
3Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
The name of the unit
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 54
■Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the
wireless network settings.
1Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3Press ON SCREEN.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
displayed on the TV screen.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.52).
Access Point Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.55).
Manual Setting
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually.
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.55).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.56).
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 55
Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit
starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available
access points appears on the TV screen.
1Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
2Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless
connection setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and
security key for your network.
1Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point and select “NEXT”.
2Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select “NEXT”.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 56
3Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed
to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26
hexadecimal digits.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or
64 hexadecimal digits.
4Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
5To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available
access points appears on the TV screen.
1Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
2Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 57
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
Y
Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly
encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected
to the unit without permission.
1Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3Press ON SCREEN.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
Direct” and select “OK”.
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
Y
If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication
is not encrypted.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 58
9Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed
to Step 10.
Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
10Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.
The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a
mobile device.
11Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
1Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
2Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
3When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.
12To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 59
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network
MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,
allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of
devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and
music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use
application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible
products, visit the Yamaha website.
• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the
dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
•Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different
room and play them back simultaneously.
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.)
MusicCast CONTROLLER
To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you
need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on
the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device.
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network.
You can also configure the unit's wireless settings at once.
Y
• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).
1Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on
your mobile device and tap “Setup”.
X
If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.
3Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.
4Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.
5Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to
playback.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
• If you configure the unit's wireless settings with this method, the signal strength
indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
• You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit
(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.133) in the
“Setup” menu.
CONNECT
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
z
En 60
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
1Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
player) connected to the unit.
2Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
3Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models) (p.69)
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.72)
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.76)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.80)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.82)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.85)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.89)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.92)
4Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
X
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL
on the front panel (p.107).
On-screen input selection
aPress ON SCREEN.
bUse the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
cUse the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press
ENTER.
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for
signal output changes.
X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.61).
•When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution
supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have
connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,
the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
•If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (p.136), you can turn on/off each zone by
pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
OUT 1+2 Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
OUT 1+2
HDMI OUT Sel.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
PR
OG
RAM
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
VOLUME
MUTE
HDMI OUT
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
En 61
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
1Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
X
You can select SCENE 1-4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5-12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.113).
On-screen scene selection
aPress ON SCREEN.
bUse the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
cUse the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER.
SCENE (SCENE key)
Input
Input (p.60) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER
Audio Select (p.109) Auto Auto --
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.60) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2
Mode
DSP Program (p.63) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo
Pure Direct Mode (p.128) Auto Auto Auto Auto
Enhancer (p.68) Off On On On
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.109) On On On On
1
2
3
4
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
SCENE
Cursor keys
En 62
Registering a scene
1Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.
2Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete”
appears on the front display.
X
•The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device
connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device
type in “Device Control” (p.114) in the “Scene” menu.
• (China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of the
unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and
Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene
assignments in “Detail” (p.114) in the “Scene” menu.
X
When the input source is TUNER, USB or NET, the selected radio station or content is
assigned.
SET Complete
SCENE1
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
Sound Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass
Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level,
Subwoofer Trim
Video Video Mode
Volume Master Volume
Lipsync Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
SCENE
En 63
Selecting the sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround
decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite
sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.64).
Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.65).
Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.67).
Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.67).
Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.68).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.68).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
aPress ON SCREEN.
bUse the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
cUse the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder
and press ENTER.
X
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the
“DSP Program” menu (p.116).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.140).
Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®
•Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
•When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.66) does not work.
Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™
•When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.108) in the “Option” menu.
•When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.64) does not work.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
PROGRAM
Cursor keys
En 64
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD
3
)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP HD3). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
X
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.128) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields.
•The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the
unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the
rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
programs, and games.
MOVIE THEATER
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
CLASSICAL
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
FPL FPR
3
HD
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.
Enhanced
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.
En 65
ENTERTAINMENT ■Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
CLASSICAL
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices
are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic
and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background
music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more
spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to
the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that
uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread
richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
sound.
Hall in Amsterdam The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
the church.
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.
En 66
LIVE/CLUB
STEREO
Y
CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.64) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.66) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected.
■Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound
field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to
enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
X
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you
can place them in the front (p.20) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual
CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo
headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound
program or a surround decoder.
Village Vanguard The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.
Warehouse Loft The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete
walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.
En 67
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo
sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and
produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.
1Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled
or disabled.
Y
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back
speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.67).
•If “Layout (Surround)” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA
FRONT (p.66) works when multichannel source is played back.
■Playing back in extended multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.
X
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and
the selected decode type (p.117).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.159).
1Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.
Y
•When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.66) does not work.
•If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is
used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby
Atmos content or a DTS:X content is played).
•When the Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.64) does not work.
STRAIGHT
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
Auto
Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
for other sources.
bDsur
Uses the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is
played.
Neural:X
Uses the DTS Neural:X decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as DTS:X content) is
played.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
†‡ Dsur
SUR. DECODE
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
STRAIGHT
SUR.DECODE
En 68
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with
the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound
quality.
1Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.
Y
When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen menu and “Option” menu
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Playing back digitally compressed formats
(such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,
allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before
it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound
modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when
“Hi-Res Mode” (p.109) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).
1Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is
enabled or disabled.
Y
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
–Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
–DSD audio
X
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.109) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
PURE DIRECT
L R
VOL.
Enhancer On
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
ENHANCERHi
-
Res
“ENHANCER” lights up
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
PURE DIRECT
ENHANCER
En 69
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
from registered radio stations.
Y
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in
U.S.A. model.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz
for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to
100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1Set the unit to standby mode.
2When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
3Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.
4Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and
turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
3Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for
about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select
98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
Y
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.
X
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.110) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an
FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
MAIN ZONE zSTRAIGHT
PROGRAM
FM50/AM9
TUNER FRQ STEP
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
P
RE
S
ET
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
TUNING
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 70
Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
X
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.79).
■Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.69) to
tune into the desired radio station.
2Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
■Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
Y
•“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
•“Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
•“Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
X
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.79).
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
Preset number
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 71
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■Playback screen
aRadio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(FM/AM) and frequency.
bTUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
cOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor key (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■Browse screen
aPreset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor key (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
bPreset number
cOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor key (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the Menu operation keys to redisplay it.
ab
c
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.
Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the Menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
c
b
a
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 72
Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models only)
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound
and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also
receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations
using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient
transmission method.
Y
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being
covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check
WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.
X
For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.38).
Preparing the DAB tuning
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to
perform an initial scan.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2Press BAND to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you have not
performed an initial scan yet.
3Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the
first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
X
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.74).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.106) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial
scan.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2Press BAND to select the DAB band.
3Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.
Y
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
X
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.110) in the “Option” menu.
Press
[ENTER]
Init Scan
VOL.
>>>-------
30%
Init Scan
VOL.
BBC Radio 4
DAB
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
BBC Radio 4
DAB
Daily Service
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
BBC National
DAB 2
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
Secondary station
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
TUNING
BAND
ENTER
TUNER
En 73
Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
X
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
■Registering a DAB radio station as presets
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
1Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
(p.72) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
■Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2Press BAND to select the DAB band.
3Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
Y
•“No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
•“Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
•“Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
X
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.71).
01:BBC Radio 4
Preset
Preset OK
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
Preset number
02:Empty
Preset
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
PRESET:01
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
MEMORY
PRESET
BAND
TUNER
En 74
Displaying the DAB information
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned
into a DAB radio station.
1Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
displayed item appears.
X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to
100 [best]).
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2Press BAND to select the DAB band.
3Press OPTION.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB
channel label.
6To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label Ensemble name
Program Type Station genre
Date And Time Current date and time
Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Info
Program Type
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
Item name
Classic FM
Classic Music
DAB
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
Information
Tune AID
12B Level: 80
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
DAB channel label Reception strength
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
INFO
BAND
OPTION
ENTER
TUNER
Cursor keys
En 75
■DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency Channel label
174.928 MHz 5A
176.640 MHz 5B
178.352 MHz 5C
180.064 MHz 5D
181.936 MHz 6A
183.648 MHz 6B
185.360 MHz 6C
187.072 MHz 6D
188.928 MHz 7A
190.640 MHz 7B
192.352 MHz 7C
194.064 MHz 7D
195.936 MHz 8A
197.648 MHz 8B
199.360 MHz 8C
201.072 MHz 8D
202.928 MHz 9A
204.640 MHz 9B
206.352 MHz 9C
208.064 MHz 9D
209.936 MHz 10A
211.648 MHz 10B
213.360 MHz 10C
215.072 MHz 10D
216.928 MHz 11A
218.640 MHz 11B
220.352 MHz 11C
222.064 MHz 11D
223.936 MHz 12A
225.648 MHz 12B
227.360 MHz 12C
229.072 MHz 12D
230.784 MHz 13A
232.496 MHz 13B
234.208 MHz 13C
235.776 MHz 13D
237.488 MHz 13E
239.200 MHz 13F
Frequency Channel label
En 76
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
from registered radio stations.
Y
If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM
antennas.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2Press BAND to select the FM band.
3Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for
about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select
98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
Y
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.
X
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.110) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an
FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
X
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.79).
■Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.76) to
tune into the desired radio station.
2Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
Preset number
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNING
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 77
■Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2Press BAND to select the FM band
3Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
Y
•“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
•“Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
•“Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
X
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.79).
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
PRESET
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 78
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in
many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System
data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and
“Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting
station.
■Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting
station.
X
We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.79).
2Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
displayed item appears.
Y
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service.
Info
Program Type
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
STEREO TUNED
Item name
FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
STEREO TUNED
Information
Frequency (always displayed)
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
INFO
En 79
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■Playback screen
aRadio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(DAB/FM) and frequency.
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.78), the Radio
Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text”
and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
bTUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
cOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■Browse screen
aPreset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
bPreset number
cOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Y
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
仮画面
ab
c
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.
Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
c
b
a
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 80
Playing back music via Bluetooth
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as
smartphones) on the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the
unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Y
•To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones)
and Bluetooth speakers/headphones at the same time.
• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.
For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.39).
X
For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.163).
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and
play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
Y
The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
1Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input
source.
2On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of
the unit) from the available device list.
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be
made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
3On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is
displayed on the TV.
X
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth
connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Setup menu items” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
The unit Bluetooth speakers/
headphones
The unit Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTER
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
NET
PH
O
N
O
US
B
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
O
N
O
N
SC
REEN
DI
S
PLAY
M
O
DE
M
O
VIE
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEEP
ENT
VO
L
U
M
E
PR
OG
RA
M
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
HT
ENHAN
C
E
R
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
M
EMOR
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
BLUETOOTH
External device
operation keys
En 81
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between Bluetooth speakers/headphones and the unit, and enjoy audio
played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Y
• To use this function, set “Transmitter” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
1Use the input selection keys (except BLUETOOTH) to
select an input source.
2Press ON SCREEN.
3Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Setup” !
“Bluetooth” ! “Audio Send” ! “Device Search” and
“OK”.
The list of available Bluetooth devices (BD addresses) is displayed.
4Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
X
The checkmark indicates the Bluetooth device currently selected.
5While the Bluetooth speakers/headphones are in the
pairing mode, use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER.
When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the
unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
X
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform the disconnect operation on the
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources
and USB cannot be delivered.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Input selection keys
Cursor keys
En 82
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32
format).
X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.163).
Connecting a USB storage device
1Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this
case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
•The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents
and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
1Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
X
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
DISPLAY
RETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
USB
SILENT CINEMA
(CONNECT)
PROGRAM
ENTER
5V 1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
Connected
USB
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
USB
En 83
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
displayed.
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,
hold down RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.100).
■Browse screen
aStatus indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.84) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
bList name
cContents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
dItem number/total
eOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
a
e
c
b
d
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 84
■Playback screen
aStatus indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.84) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
bPlayback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
cOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
X
You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
■Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage
device contents.
1When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
a
c
b
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 85
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
Y
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.39). You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network Connection”
(p.131) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.
X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.163).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure
the media sharing setting on each music server.
■For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The
following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).
1Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
5Click “OK” to exit.
X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
■For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing
settings.
En 86
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start
playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
X
If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
displayed.
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down
RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically.
•You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.100).
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 87
■Browse screen
aStatus indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.88) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
bList name
cContents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
dItem number/total
eOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■Playback screen
aStatus indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.88) and playback status (such as
play/pause).
bPlayback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
cOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
X
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.112).
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
a
e
c
b
d
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
a
c
b
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 88
■Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 89
Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
Y
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.39). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to
the unit in “Network” (p.131) in the “Information” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Folder names are different depending on the language.
Playback of Internet radio
1Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the
playback screen is displayed.
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
•You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.100).
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 90
■Browse screen
aPlayback indicator
bList name
cContents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
dItem number/total
eOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■Playback screen
aPlayback indicator
bPlayback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
cOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
X
• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
Add to favorites
(Remove from
favorites)
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the
“Favorites” folder (p.91).
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
a
e
c
b
d
Menu Function
Add to favorites Adds the current station to the “Favorites” folder (p.91).
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
a
c
b
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 91
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you
can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse
screen.
X
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
source as shortcuts (p.100).
■Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
1Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse
screen or start playback of it to display the playback
screen.
2Press the cursor key (r) to select “Add to favorites” and
press ENTER.
The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.
Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.
Browse screen
X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 92
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
Y
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.141) in the
“Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
X
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.163).
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.103).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.132) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.133) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.112) in the “Input” menu to “Off”.
PC
iTunes
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
Router
(wired or wireless)
The unit
(wired or wireless)
Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.
iTunes (example) iOS 10 (example)
En 93
■Playback screen
aPlayback indicator
bPlayback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
cOperation menu
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
X
You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
Menu Function
Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
a
c
b
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 94
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the
unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
Multi-zone configuration examples
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center
about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
■Enjoying music in another room
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.30
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.95
■Enjoying videos/music in another room
You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.
Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
Connections
TV: p.96
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.30
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.95
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Connection
TV: p.96
• Audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to
the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.165).
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2)
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Living room (main zone)
Guest room
(Zone2)
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Video (HDMI)
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2)
Video/audio (HDMI)
En 95
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.
■Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies depending on
the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see
“Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.30).
Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect
speakers to the external amplifier.
X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with volume control,
set “Volume” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
• Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with
the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short
circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2
)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
43
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
VIDEO
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUN
D
SURROUND
R
56
L R
ZONE
AM
PRE OUT
SU
B
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA
S
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT (ZONE2) jacks
Zone2
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
En 96
■Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2.
Y
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit with
an HDMI cable (p.34).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the
“Setup” menu to “Zone2”.
X
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the
HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.30).
■Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)
You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied
with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE
IN/OUT jacks.
X
(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for each
device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1
B
AV 1
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
OPTICAL
Z
O
56
AM
Y
Y
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
HDMI
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
2(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear) HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
Main zone
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
Zone2
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
D
VD)
A
XIAL
COAXIAL
T
ENNA
RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
F.PRESENCE
R
56
L R RL L
ZONE 2
SINGLE
ZONE 2/BI-AMP
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP1EXTRA SP2
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETW
O
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
B
AV 1
A
(HDCP2.2)
IN OUT
REMOTE
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
(supplied with each device)
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2
Main zone
Infrared signal
transmitter
En 97
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support
remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting
the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2
En 98
Controlling Zone2
1Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2Press z (receiver power).
Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.
When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display.
3Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
Y
• Audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect
the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone
output” (p.165).
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to
“SERVER”.
4Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models) (p.69)
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.72)
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.76)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.80)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.82)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.85)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.89)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.92)
Y
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or
web control (p.101) to control Zone2.
•AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main
zone.
X
•The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source
selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2
input with the web control (p.101) or AV CONTROLLER (p.9).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input
or use the party mode (p.99).
Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN/ZONE2
z
Input selection keys
En 99
■Other operations for Zone2
The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.
Adjusting the volume
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
Press SCENE.
X
To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold
down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display.
Setting the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with
enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Press ENHANCER.
■Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is
being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo
playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function
when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house
party.
1Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front
display.
Y
If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.136) in the “Setup”
menu to “Enable” (default).
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENHANCER
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
SCENE
PARTY
En 100
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth
input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the
shortcut numbers.
X
• You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.91).
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.
Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
1Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
2Press MEMORY.
X
To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric
keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
3To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
1Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
2Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40).
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut.
Y
•“No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
•“Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
unit.
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or
deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list
and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.59) on your mobile device.
01:Empty
Memory Preset
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
Shortcut number (flashes)
02:Empty
Memory Preset
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
01:USB
Recall Preset
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
PH
O
N
O
TUNER
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
MEMORY
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Numeric keys
En 101
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
Y
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases,
configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode,
set “Network Standby” (p.103) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
–Internet Explorer 11.x
–Safari 9.x
1Start the web browser.
2Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
X
• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.141) in the “Information” menu.
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.103) to access the web
control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may
change each time the unit is turned on.
• If you have enabled the MAC Address Filter (p.132), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the
PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction
manual.
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone,
iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.9).
Web browser
Web control
PC Router The unit
Web control
(wired or wireless) (wired or wireless)
En 102
Top menu screen
aCONTROL
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
bSTATUS
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.
cSETTINGS
Moves to the settings screen.
dPARTY MODE
Turns on/off the party mode (p.99).
eSYSTEM POWER
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
fMAIN VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used
for volume adjustment.
gRELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Control screen
aPLAY INFO
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
bTOP MENU
Moves to the top menu screen.
cSCENE
Selects a scene for the selected zone.
dPOWER
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
eVOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments
used for volume adjustment.
fRELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Y
Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
c
d
a
b
e
f
g
b
ad
c
e
f
En 103
Settings screen
aRename
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.133) or the name of each zone (p.134). Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Network
Selects the network connection method (p.131) or configures the network parameters (such as IP
address) (p.131). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.92). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to
the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.132) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to
apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen
reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.132).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
Google Analytics
Displays an explanation of data collection by Google Analytics. Data collection can be enabled or
disabled at any time.
bBACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
cRELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
b
a
c
Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices
correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other
external devices.
• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
En 104
Viewing the current status
You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently
selected) on the front panel display or TV.
Switching information on the front display
1Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various
display items.
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding
information appears.
X
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can
also be applied separately to each input source.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder
is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Audio Decoder
Info
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
Item name
†‡ Dsur
AV1
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
Information
Currently input
source Item
AV 1-7
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO 1-3
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
TUNER (FM/AM)
(AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models)
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
* (U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station
(p.78).
TUNER (DAB) (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.74) for details.
Bluetooth
USB
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)
MusicCast Link
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet MAC
(Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
INFO
En 105
Viewing the status information on the TV
1Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
2To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Input source/
Party mode status
Audio format/
Decoder
Compressed Music
Enhancer status
CINEMA DSP status Sound mode
Volume/YPAO
Volume status
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
ENTE
R
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
ON
SC
REE
N
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
DISPLAY
En 106
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is
available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings
during playback.
1Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
X
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.
Tone Control
Option
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOL.
Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
low-frequency range individually. 107
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.) Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 107
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is
adjusted.
107
Dialogue
(Dialog)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 108
DTS Dialogue
Control
(DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents. 108
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 108
Lipsync Adjustment
(Lipsync Adj.)Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. 108
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 108
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)Enables/disables Extra Bass. 108
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enhancer
(Enhancer)Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 109
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio). 109
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing settings
configured in the “Setup” menu. 109
En 107
■Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
Y
• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
X
You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE CONTROL
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency
levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
Settings
X
•YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.43).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
night.
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when
the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high
volume.
Input Settings
(Input Settings)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)Corrects volume differences between input sources. 109
Audio Select
(A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one
audio connection is made for one input source. 109
Video Out
(V.Out)Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 110
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception. 110
Init Scan
(Init Scan)
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception. 72
Tune AID
(Tune AID)
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label. 74
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device
(p.84) or media server (p.88). -
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device
(p.84) or media server (p.88). -
Item Function Page
Off (Off)Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On)Enables YPAO Volume.
Off (Off)The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
En 108
■Dialogue (Dialog)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0 to 3
X
This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.
DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents.
Setting range
0 to 6
X
This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.
X
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are
used.
–Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.64) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
■Lipsync Adjustment (Lipsync Adj.)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
X
This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).
■Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass
sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.
Settings
Ideal position
Off (Off)Disables Extra Bass.
On (On)Enables Extra Bass.
En 109
■Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68).
X
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
•You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68).
Settings
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
Y
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
–DSD audio
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is
set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel
PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
■Video Processing (Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured
in “Processing” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
■Input Settings (Input Settings)
Configures the input settings.
X
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences
when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Audio Select (A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input
source.
Settings
Off (Off)Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On)Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On)
Enables the high-resolution mode.
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)
Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.
Direct (Direct)Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
(Processing)Enables the video signal processing.
Auto (Auto)
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
HDMI (HDMI)Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
through the HDMI jack.
Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt)Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
input through the AUDIO jacks.
En 110
Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
■FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Off (Off)Does not output video.
AV 1-7 (AV1-7), VIDEO
AUX (V-AUX)Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Stereo (Stereo)Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
En 111
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
X
You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
X
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 112
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 112
Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 112
DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback. 112
En 112
■Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
X
Some network input sources (such as “AirPlay”) cannot be renamed or have the icons changed.
■Setup procedure
1Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto” or “Manual” and press the cursor key (w).
If you select “Auto”, the unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device. In
this case, skip Steps 3 and 4.
X
This step is available only when “AV1-7”, “VIDEO AUX” or “AUDIO1-3” (available only when any audio digital
input jack is assigned) is selected.
2Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to
“DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Settings
■Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
■DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
X
A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When
this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on
the same network.
Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20
dB and mute).
Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB
and mute).
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable Allows DMCs to control playback.
En 113
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.61) using the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the
cursor key (q).
X
You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
■Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected
scene.
X
If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the
corresponding SCENE key (p.62).
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 113
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also
configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be
included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.
114
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 115
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 115
En 114
■Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments.
Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via
HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1-2: HDMI Control
SCENE3-12: Off
Y
To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.165).
Detail
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low
volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 and include “Volume” in
the assignments for SCENE4.
X
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device and a network
device.
Choices
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI
Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via
HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control.
Input
Input (p.60), Station*1, Listening*1, Music Content*2, Playback*2, Audio Select
(p.109)
*1 Only when “TUNER” is selected
*2 Only when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.60)
Mode DSP Program (p.63), Pure Direct Mode (p.128), Enhancer (p.68), Enhancer Hi-Res
Mode (p.109)
Sound Tone Control (p.107), YPAO Volume (p.107), Adaptive DRC (p.107), Extra Bass
(p.108)
Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.128), Dialogue Lift (p.108), Dialogue Level (p.108),
Subwoofer Trim (p.108)
Video Video Mode (p.129)
Volume Master Volume (p.60)
Lipsync Lipsync (p.127), Delay (p.127)
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.123), PEQ Select (p.126)
Check or uncheck
En 115
Playing a radio station or content included as the scene assignments automatically when
pressing SCENE
Y
Individual contents cannot be registered for “Bluetooth” and “AirPlay”. The content lastly played back on each
device will be recalled.
1In the “Detail” screen, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Input” and press the cursor key
(r).
2Use the cursor keys (q/w) to set “Listening” or “Playback” to “On”.
When “TUNER” is selected, “Listening” is available.
When “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected, “Playback” is available.
3If “Input” is unchecked, press ENTER to check the box.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■Setup procedure
1Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■Reset
Restores the default settings (p.61) for the selected scene.
En 116
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu)
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV
screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
X
You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En 117
DSP Program menu items
X
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.
■Settings for sound programs
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used in
combination with the selected sound
program.
Auto, bDsur*, Neural:X, Neo:6
Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to reduce
it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation. 1ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field. 0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field. 0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to reduce
it.
Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear
sound.
Reverb Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound generation.
0ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower to
weaken it.
Item Function Settings
En 118
The following items are available when you select “7ch Stereo”.
X
Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
■Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to
“bDsur” or “Neo:6 Music”.
Item Function Settings
Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5
Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume
balance.
-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the front side, and
lower to enhance the rear side.
Left / Right Balance Adjusts the left and right volume
balance.
-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the right side, and
lower to enhance the left side.
Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance
using the front presence speakers.
0 to 5 to 10
Higher to enhance the upside, and
lower to enhance the downside. (The
front presence speakers do not
produce sounds when “Height
Balance” is set to “0”.)
Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound
output. Off, On
Decode Type Item Function Settings
bDsur Center Spread
Selects whether to spread
the center channel signals
to left and right when
2-channel source is
played.
Off, On
Select “On” to spread center channel
signals to left and right if you feel the
center sound is too strong when
2-channel source is played.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of the
front sound field.
0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
En 119
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En 120
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 43
Manual Setup
Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 123
Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 123
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 123
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 124
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 124
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 124
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 124
Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 125
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 125
Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. 125
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 125
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 126
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 126
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 126
Sound
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 127
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 127
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 127
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 127
Max Volume Sets the limit value of the volumes. 127
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 128
Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 128
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 128
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3.128
Virtual Presence Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 128
Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 128
Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents. 128
Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 129
En 121
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 130
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 130
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 131
Network
Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 131
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 131
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 132
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 132
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 133
MusicCast Link Power Interlock Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit) also turns on the power of
other devices of the network. 133
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 133
Audio Receive
Disconnect Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 80
Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 133
Audio Send
Transmitter Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. 134
Device Search Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter. 81
Multi Zone
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 134
Zone2 Set
Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 135
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes. 135
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 135
Audio Delay Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing. 135
Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 135
Enhancer Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output. 135
Tone Control Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 output. 135
Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output. 136
Balance Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 output. 136
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 136
HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 136
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 136
Menu Item Function Page
En 122
Function
Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 137
Remote PROGRAM Key Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control. 137
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 137
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 137
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 138
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 138
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 138
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 139
ECO
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 139
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 140
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 140
Menu Item Function Page
En 123
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
X
• Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting.
• Default settings are underlined.
■Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the
selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
•Power Amp Assign
•Configuration
•Distance
•Level
•Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2
X
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
■Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Choices
■Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers (with
built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp
connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance your system.
Settings
Pattern1 ▶ 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 ▶ 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
Basic Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 7-channel
plus front presence speakers) (p.18).
7.1 +1Zone Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 7.1 system in
the main zone (p.27).
5.1.2 +1Zone Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 5.1.2 system in
the main zone (p.28).
5.1 Bi-Amp Select this option when you use the 5.1 system (including bi-amp front speakers)
(p.28).
7.1 Bi-Amp [ext.SB] Select this option when you use the 7.1 system (including bi-amp front speakers
and surround back channel expansion using an external amplifier) (p.29).
En 124
■Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
X
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or
larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.
• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover” setting after pressing ENTER.
Frequency sounds lower than the specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output
from the corresponding speakers.
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
X
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
X
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”.
Large Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Large Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
works when you select a sound program.
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
Small x2
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
En 125
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
Settings
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Settings
X
When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Layout
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.
Surround
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Settings
X
This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Front Presence
Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates
the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings
X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
•To play Dolby Atmos contents using the front presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.22).
■Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Large Select this option for large speakers.
Small Select this option for small speakers.
None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Use
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.
Rear Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the
room.
Front Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.66) works in this case.
Front Height Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side
wall.
Overhead Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
speakers.
En 126
■Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
X
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.43). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■Manual equalizer adjustment
1Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
X
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.43) to the “Manual” fields for fine
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for
subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
5To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select
an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the
cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front
speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
Off Does not output test tones.
On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.
En 127
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-3
Settings
Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
Y
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set
to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to
“Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
X
•“Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
• This setting is also available in “Lipsync Adjustment” (p.108) in the “Option” menu.
■Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS
signals) playback.
Settings
■Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volume.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
adjusted based on the input signal information.
En 128
■Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.68).
Settings
■Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
■CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.64). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD3
functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
■Virtual Presence Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround
speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are
connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected (p.64).
Settings
X
Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
Presence Speaker” to “Off”.
■Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.
Settings
X
VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
■Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
contents.
Settings
X
If audio output is not available when Dolby Atmos or DTS:X signals are input, set “Object Decode Mode” to
“Enable”.
Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
Auto
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected
input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed.
Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
and the volume level.
Off Disables CINEMA DSP HD3.
On Enables CINEMA DSP HD3.
Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
On Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
Disable Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be played in
normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.
Enable Enables playback of object-based audio signals.
En 129
Video
Configures the video output settings.
■Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
X
•When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce
video output delay.
•When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.144) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)
Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
X
This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p
(4K) signals.
Direct Disables the video signal processing.
Processing Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the
screen.
En 130
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.165).
Settings
Y
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.165) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set
to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is
switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1-3
Default
AUDIO 1
Y
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.167) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Y
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.
Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when
“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
■Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
X
•The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
•The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) is set to “Main”.
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT
2 jack.
Settings
Y
The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
Off Disables ARC.
On Enables ARC.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Off Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
En 131
■Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in
standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (AV
1-7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby
indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Network
Configures the network settings.
■Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
■IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
Off (This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
power saving mode.
Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.39).
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
wireless network” (p.52).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.57).
Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
details, see “Manual network settings”.
On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
as IP address).
En 132
■Manual network settings
1Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
value.
4To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).
Settings
With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.
■MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
X
AirPlay (p.92) and DMC (p.112) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
MAC Address 1-10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■Setup procedure
1Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1-5” or “MAC Address 6-10” and press
ENTER.
2Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
value.
4To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off Disables the network standby function.
On Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.
En 133
■Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
■Setup procedure
1Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit)
also turns on the power of other devices of the network.
Settings
Bluetooth
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
■Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.80).
Settings
■Audio Receive
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices
(Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a
connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
X
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.132) is set to “Off”.
Off Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
On Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
Off Disables the Bluetooth function.
On Enables the Bluetooth function.
Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
On Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
En 134
■Audio Send
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio transmitter.
Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones (p.81).
Settings
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■Setup procedure
1Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Off Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
On Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
En 135
■Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable volume
adjustments for Zone2.
Settings
X
This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting.
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Audio Delay
Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing so that the audio is synchronized with the video.
Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
Mono
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
Settings
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68) for Zone2 output.
Settings
Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2
output.
Settings
Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Variable Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.
On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.
Off Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Auto
Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.
Manual Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
Bypass Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass).
En 136
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.
Settings
Balance
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 output.
Setting range
-20 to 0 to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right)
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set”
(p.134).
■HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main, Zone2
X
For details on audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.165).
Zone2 - Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set
to “Zone2”.
■Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.99).
Choice
Target: Zone2
Settings
Off Disables Extra Bass.
On Enables Extra Bass.
On Enables the audio output.
Off Disables the audio output (video output only).
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.
En 137
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
■Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER.
2Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER.
3To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
X
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
■Remote PROGRAM Key
Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.
For example, when “INPUT Selection” is selected, the PROGRAM keys will operate as the input
switching keys.
Settings
■Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Y
The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.140) is set to “On”.
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
DSP Program
Selection Select a sound program.
INPUT Selection Select an input source for playback.
NET Selection Select a network source.
Preset Selection Select a registered item (shortcut).
Browse Screen -
1Page Up/Down Move to the previous/next page of the browse screen list.
Subwoofer Trim Adjust the subwoofer volume.
Dialogue Level Adjust the volume of dialogue sounds.
qRepeat / wShuffle Select the repeat/shuffle setting for the USB storage device or media server.
On Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
En 138
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
■Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input
switching.
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
Piano Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Power The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”
Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
with “Manual”.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High Transmits the electronic signal.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
En 139
■Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
X
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
■Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby
mode.
Settings
Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off
X
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.
Off Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 Minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input
signals are detected for 20 minutes.
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to
standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
En 140
■ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting “ECO Mode” to “On”. After setting, be
sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.
Settings
Y
•When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
X
If new firmware is available, (mail icon) appears at the upper right of the “Information”. For details, see
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.147).
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Off Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
En 141
Types of information
You can check the following information in the Information menu.
■Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
X
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
• Some information may not be available depending on the signal type.
■Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
■HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
■Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output Channel
The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker
channels”) and the speaker terminals from which signals are
output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog)
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.133)
MusicCast Network The status of the MusicCast network connection
Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
En 142
(When using Wireless Direct)
■System
Displays the system information on the unit.
X
If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, (mail icon) appears at the upper right of the
“Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can
update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s
firmware via the network” (p.147).
■Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1Set the unit to standby mode.
2While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
3Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
SSID The SSID of the wireless network
Security Security method
Security Key Security key
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address
MusicCast Network The status of the MusicCast network connection
Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.144)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.144)
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.143)
Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.144)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2
Volume The volume for Zone2
MAIN ZONE zSTRAIGHT
PROGRAM
En 143
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
X
Default settings are underlined.
Changing the speaker impedance setting
(SPEAKER IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers
connected.
Settings
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
Item Function Page
SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 143
REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 143
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 144
TUNER FRQ STEP (Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 144
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 144
MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 144
4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 145
DTS MODE Switches the DTS format notification setting. 145
RECOV./BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from
the backup. 145
INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 146
FIRM. UPDATE Updates the firmware. 146
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 146
6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.
ON Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.
8¬MIN
SPEAKER¡IMP.
ON
REMOTE SENSOR
En 144
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1).
When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1, ID2
■Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 3 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 3 seconds.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.129)
when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
9-kHz steps.
ID1
REMOTE ID
FM50/AM9
TUNER FRQ STEP
YES Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
supported by the TV only.)
SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
NTSC
TV FORMAT
YES
MONITOR CHECK
En 145
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and
playback device are connected to the unit.
Settings
Format
Y
•When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with
Ethernet.
• Regardless of the setting, 4K signals are input as “MODE 2” for the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE)
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the
unit supports.
Settings
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■Backup/recovery procedure
1Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the
process.
Choices
MODE 1
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
MODE 1 MODE 2
8 bit 10 bit 12 bit 8 bit 10 bit 12 bit
4K/60, 50 Hz
RGB 4:4:4 ,- -
YCbCr 4:4:4 ,- -
YCbCr 4:2:2 ,-
YCbCr 4:2:0 ,,-
4K/30, 25, 24 Hz
RGB 4:4:4 ,,-
YCbCr 4:4:4 ,,-
YCbCr 4:2:2 ,,
MODE 1
4K MODE
MODE 1 This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.
Use this setting under normal circumstances.
MODE 2 Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly
output a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.
BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
RECOVERY Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
MODE 1
DTS MODE
BACKUP
RECOV./BACKUP
En 146
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as
needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information
supplied with updates.
■Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.
Choices
X
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.147).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
X
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.142) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
CANCEL
INITIALIZE
USB
FIRM. UPDATE
x.xx
VERSION
En 147
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
X
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED
SETUP” menu (p.146).
• The firmware update indicator (p.12) on the front display lights up when a firmware
update is available via the network.
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed.
Updating the unit’s firmware immediately
1Read the on-screen description.
2To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select
“START” and press ENTER.
3If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
X
If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”. (mail icon)
appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will
be displayed in the “System” screen (p.142). You can update the unit’s firmware by
pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.146).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
Information icon
Message
System Icon
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
VO
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 148
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off
1Read the on-screen description.
2To set the firmware to update at power off, use the cursor
keys to select “LATER” and press ENTER.
3Press z (receiver power) to turn off the unit.
The following message is displayed on the front display.
X
The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update 2
minutes after Step 3.
4To start the firmware update, press ENTER.
X
• To cancel the firmware update and turn off the unit, press RETURN.
• You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.
• The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the
unit with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.
If the firmware update is complete, the unit turns off automatically.
UPDATE:ENTER
NETWORK
Firmware update indicator (flashes)
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP/MENU
TOP MENU
321
AUDIO
2 431
6
V-AUX
75
AV
BLUETOOTH
NET
PHONO
USB
TUNER
4321
8765
9 0
4321
SCENE
MUTE
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
MODE
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENT
PRESETTUNING
VOLUME
PROGRAM
HDMI OUTPARTY
BAND
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
MAIN
ZONE 2
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TO
P MEN
U
3
2
1
AUDI
O
2
4
3
1
6
V
-
AUX
7
5
AV
BLUET
OO
TH
NET
PH
O
N
O
USB
TUNER
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
9
0
4
3
2
1
SC
EN
E
MUTE
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
DI
S
PLA
Y
M
O
D
E
M
O
VI
E
MUS
I
C
INF
O
S
LEE
P
ENT
P
RE
S
ET
TU
NIN
G
V
O
L
U
ME
PR
OG
RAM
HDMI
O
U
T
PARTY
BAND
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
M
EMORY
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
ENTER
RETURN
z
Cursor keys
En 149
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the
speaker settings again (p.43). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual
Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.123).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We
recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the
unit in advance (p.127). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.127).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied.
If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be
applied when the receiver is turned on (p.128). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2
(p.128).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the
“Option” menu (p.109).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.165). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required
every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on
how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are
watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.137) in the “Setup” menu to turn off
the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.139).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha
product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different
remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.144).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio
played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
function, set “Standby Through” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also
switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.
En 150
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
First, check the following:
1The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
2The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
3The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power
supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.25).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for
the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
“Off” (p.139).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.143).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.25).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the
unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.140).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power
supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
outlet and plug it again.)
En 151
Audio
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.144).
The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.143).
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.141).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.127).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.141).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.126).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.43) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.124).
The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.43) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.128).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.126).
Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.43) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.125).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 152
No sound from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI
Control is used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
from the speakers connected to the unit.
TV audio is selected as the input source. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.32).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.130).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.130). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.141). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.140).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
The sound is interrupted.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI audio
output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal
circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
(p.96).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 153
Video
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.144).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal”
in the “Information” menu (p.141). For information about video signals supported by the
unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.167).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV
and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the VIDEO
AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback
device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.34).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
The video is interrupted.
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
(p.60).
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due
to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
(p.96).
En 154
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception
(p.110).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or
other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.69).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.69).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually
(p.70).
Problem Cause Remedy
No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.72).
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor. Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.74), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area. Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.74), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
not provide information. Contact the DAB broadcaster.
No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station.
En 155
Bluetooth
Problem Cause Remedy
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.133).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.80).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not
working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.80).
No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback.
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.80).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices.
En 156
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.131). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.131).
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless
router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access
point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
obstacles between them.
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
shared (p.85).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the
unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.132).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.85).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
En 157
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
varies depending on the radio station.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.132).
No sound from the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off. Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
network. Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The MusicCast connection cannot be made on
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Disable the cellular data transmission.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off. Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.146).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 158
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.85).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.39).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
again.
RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.144).
Remote Off The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote
control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu to “ON” (p.143).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.85). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.
Update failed. Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
En 159
Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.
Audio information (audio decoding format)
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home
Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as
independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3
dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of
sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby
TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata
that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV
receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel
audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Enabled Speaker
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the
ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled
speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional
speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing
an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.
Dolby Surround
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for
playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as
well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker
technology.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition
home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better
audio quality than that used for CDs.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format
remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This
technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Dialog Control
DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog
more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use
of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may
add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.
This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds
a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is
recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is
recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression
rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming
services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray
discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater
experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of
96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
En 160
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for
music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix
channels of surround sound.
DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.
Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing
data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
En 161
Audio Information (Others)
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the
unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and
woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel
is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase
in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video
output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and
Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals
is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and
transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using
8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to
increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.
En 162
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet
wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with
network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a
wireless home network.
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced
in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you
hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the
audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.
CINEMA DSP HD3
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and
intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.
En 163
Supported devices and file formats
This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit.
Supported devices
For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.
■Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
depending on the model.
■USB devices
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio
players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or
USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
storage device.
■AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain
Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
Made for.
iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone
5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s
iPad Pro (9.7″ and 12.9″), iPad mini 4, iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini,
iPad (3rd and 4th generation), iPad 2
iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)
(as of March 2017)
File formats
For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your
recording device or consult file's help.
■USB/PC (NAS)
* Linear PCM format only
Y
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC
files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
File Sampling frequency
(kHz)
Quantization
bitrate (bit) Bitrate The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
WAV * 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192 16/24 -2,
MP3 32/44.1/48 -8 to 320 2 -
WMA 32/44.1/48 -8 to 320 2 -
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 -8 to 320 2 -
FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192 16/24 -2,
ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 -2,
AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192 16/24 -2,
DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 -2-
En 164
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output
to a TV as shown below.
HDMI HDMI HDMIHDMI
VIDEOVIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
VIDEO in
Video conversion table
X
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
m: Available
HDMI out
Resolution 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K
HDMI in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
1080p/50, 60 Hz mmmm
1080p/24 Hz mm
4K m
COMPONENT VIDEO in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm
En 165
Multi-zone output
Audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in
Zone 2 to the unit's output jacks.
m: Available
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio
Output: On)
*2 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
*5 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input with the web
control (p.101) or use the party mode (p.99).
Information on HDMI
This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power
and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such
as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV and playback devices” (p.32) and
“Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.34).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.61)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device
operation keys
Using the unit’s
internal amplifier
(p.30)
Using an external amplifier (p.95)
In \ Zone2 Out EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack (*1)
Digital audio (HDMI) m (*2) m (*2) m (*3)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL) m(*4) m (*4)
Analog audio (AUDIO)mm
USB (*5) mm
Network sources (*5) mm
TUNER mm
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
En 166
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
Y
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2Configure the settings of the unit.
1Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
2Press ON SCREEN.
3Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
4Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
5Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
6Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
7Press ON SCREEN.
3Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
devices.
5Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
7Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select
the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV
or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
HDMI Control
Press SCENE 1
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
En 167
Y
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the
limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more
effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal
to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• “ARC” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.
Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.33).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
X
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 2.
HDMI signal compatibility
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be
output, depending on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to
the instruction manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so
that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream
signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback
device.
En 168
Trademarks
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos,
Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory Configuration.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an
electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod,
iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may
affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is
under license.
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is
strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental
performance.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Google Noto Fonts (Version 1.001)
Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
En 169
Specifications
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 9 (AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-3, PHONO, VIDEO AUX)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz)
• Video
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4)
Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX)
•Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
– Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R *1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R *2)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[F.PRESENCE, ZONE2, BI-AMP]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[SURROUND BACK, ZONE2]
–Pre Out x 7
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R)
– Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1-2, mono)
–ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)
–Headphone x 1
•HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1-2*)
* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)
Other jacks
•YPAO MIC x 1
•REMOTE IN x 1
•REMOTE OUT x 1
•TRIGGER OUT x 2
•RS-232C x 1
HDMI
•HDMI Features
– 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60,50Hz 10/12bit)
–3D Video
– ARC (Audio Return Channel)
–HDMI Control (CEC)
–Auto Lip Sync
– 21:9 Aspect Ratio
– Deep Color
– x.v.Color
– BT.2020 Colorimetry
– HDR (High Dynamic Range)
– HD audio playback
– Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode
–HDMI Zone Output
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
–VGA
– 480i/60 Hz
– 576i/50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
– 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Supported Audio Formats
–Dolby Atmos
–DTS:X
–Dolby TrueHD
–Dolby Digital Plus
–Dolby Digital
–DTS-HD Master Audio
–DTS-HD High Resolution
–DTS Express
–DTS
– DSD 2.8 MHz 2-ch to 6-ch
– PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[Australia model]
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
En 170
Bluetooth
•Sink Function
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Source Function
AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone)
• Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
• Bluetooth Version........................................................... Ver. 2.1+EDR
• Supported Profile
Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP
Source Function .............................................................A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec
Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC
Source Function ............................................................................SBC
• Wireless Output ...................................................... Bluetooth Class 2
• Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency)... 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz
• Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P) .......................... 4.0 dBm (2.5 mW)
• Maximum Communication Distance ................................10 m (33 ft)
MusicCast
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
• MusicCast Link Client ..................................................... Main, Zone2
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
Zone2
• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
•AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• Wi-Fi function
– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
USB connection
– Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz
– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
– Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency): 2412 MHz to 2472 MHz
– Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P): 17.5 dBm (56.2 mW)
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
–Dolby Atmos
–Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
–Dolby Digital
–DTS:X
–DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
–DTS Digital Surround
•Post Decoding Format
– Dolby Surround
–Neural:X
–DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 120 W+120 W
Center...................................................................................... 120 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 120 W+120 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 120 W+120 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 110 W+110 W
Center...................................................................................... 110 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 110 W+110 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 110 W+110 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 120 W+120 W
Center...................................................................................... 120 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 120 W+120 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 120 W+120 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................140 W/ch
Center.................................................................................140 W/ch
Surround L/R......................................................................140 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.............................................................140 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 135 W/ch
Center ............................................................................... 135 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 135 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 170 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 170 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 170 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 170 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 170 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 165 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 165 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 165 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 165 W/ch
•Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ............................................135/165/210/280 W
•Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω.........................................................150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω).............................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)....................................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .......................................... 45 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .....................................2.4 V or more
• Rated Output Level / Output Impedance
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ...................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)..........................................1.0 V/470 Ω
ZONE OUT..........................................................................1.0 V/470 Ω
• Maximum Output Level
PRE OUT/ZONE OUT ......................................................2.0 V or more
• Headphone Impedance ................................................. 16 Ω or more
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) .............................................+0/-3 dB
En 171
•RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ...................................................... 0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ........................................0.04% or less
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 55 W/ 8 Ω)
.........................................................................................0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
PHONO .......................................................................... 95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ................................................................. 110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out ...................................................................150 μV or less
•Channel Separation
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO ............................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ........................................................ 75 dB/60 dB or more
•Volume Control
Main Zone .............................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2 ....................................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
............................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .............................................................. 24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type .................................................. NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite .........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ......................................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ...........................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level.................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...........................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models]
.................................................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]..............87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Other models]............................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono............................................................................. 3 μV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ....................................................................69 dB/68 dB
•Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input ..........................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe
and Russia models)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...............................530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]....................................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models only)
• Tuning Range ......................................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
• Support Audio Format............... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2
• Antenna ....................................................................75 Ω unbalanced
General
•Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Brazil and General models] ....AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]..............................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model]..............................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model].........................................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model]................................................ AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................................................450 W
[Other models] ...........................................................................420 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
......................................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off...................................................................1.5 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired.........................................................................................1.8 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi).........................................................................1.8 W
Wireless Direct..........................................................................1.9 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On...............1.7 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ...................................2.7 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Brazil, Asia and General models]............................................1190 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
................................. 435 x 182 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17-1/4”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
................................. 435 x 247 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 17-1/4”)
• Weight....................................................................... 14.9 kg (32.8 lbs)
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file.
Manual Development Group
© 2017 Yamaha Corporation
Published 04/2017 AM-A0
Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
YJ290A0/EN1

Navigation menu